annotate etc/NEWS.1 @ 30893:939272c1c28b

(bs-mode-font-lock-keywords): Avoid testing for XEmacs.
author Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
date Wed, 16 Aug 2000 21:42:10 +0000
parents 550344dcef43
children 6c3081f54e62
Ignore whitespace changes - Everywhere: Within whitespace: At end of lines:
rev   line source
30786
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1 GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 5 Jan 2000
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2 Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3 See the end for copying conditions.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5 Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6 For older news, see the file ONEWS.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
8 ^L
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
9 * Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
10
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
11 ** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
12 input.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
13
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
14 ** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
15
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
16 ** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
17
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
18 ** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
19 only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
20 exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
21 (e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
22 (e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
23
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
24 ** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
25 been added.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
26
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
27 ^L
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
28 * Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
29
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
30 ** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
31
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
32 ^L
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
33 * Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
34
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
35 ** Not new, but not mentioned before:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
36 M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
37
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
38 * Changes in Emacs 20.4
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
39
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
40 ** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
41
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
42 You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
43 Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
44 `.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
45
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
46 If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
47 is the one that is used.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
48
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
49 ** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
50 the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
51 Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
52 separate from the command's regular output.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
53 Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
54 says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
55 In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
56 the buffer name.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
57
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
58 When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
59 output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
60 it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
61 cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
62
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
63 ** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
64 the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
65 is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
66 created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
67
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
68 ** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
69 example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
70 match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
71 quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
72
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
73 ** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
74 now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
75 if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
76 they never ignore case.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
77
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
78 ** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
79 under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
80 applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
81 of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
82 just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
83 convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
84 part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
85
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
86 If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
87 the same format that was used in the file before.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
88
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
89 You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
90 `inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
91
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
92 ** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
93 renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
94 This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
95
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
96 ** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
97 The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
98 buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
99 your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
100 is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
101 end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
102 Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
103
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
104 The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
105 eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
106 control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
107 format. You can now customize these variables.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
108
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
109 ** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
110 filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
111 filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
112 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
113
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
114 ** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
115 in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
116 windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
117
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
118 ** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
119 dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
120 doesn't have any effect.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
121
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
122 ** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
123 not one per buffer.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
124
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
125 ** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
126 use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
127 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
128
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
129 ** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
130 To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
131 `auto-show-mode' command.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
132
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
133 ** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
134 avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
135 versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
136 choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
137 occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
138
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
139 ** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
140 cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
141
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
142 ** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
143 character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
144 feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
145
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
146 ** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
147 the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
148 interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
149 and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
150
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
151 ** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
152
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
153 The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
154 that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
155 one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
156 codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
157 set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
158
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
159 Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
160 from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
161
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
162 IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
163 equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
164 a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
165 `?' on other systems.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
166
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
167 IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
168 feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
169 Unix.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
170
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
171 Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
172 current codepage when it starts.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
173
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
174 ** Mail changes
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
175
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
176 *** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
177 `mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
178 appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
179 non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
180 MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
181 headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
182 latin-1:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
183
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
184 MIME-version: 1.0
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
185 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
186 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
187
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
188 *** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
189 default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
190 default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
191 sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
192 buffer-file-coding-system.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
193
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
194 You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
195 sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
196 mail.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
197
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
198 *** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
199 if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
200 Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
201 list of possible coding systems.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
202
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
203 ** CC Mode changes
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
204
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
205 *** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
206 modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
207 longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
208 docstring for details.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
209
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
210 *** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
211 symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
212 found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
213 prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
214 lineup functions use this feature currently.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
215
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
216 *** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
217 "finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
218
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
219 *** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
220 "catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
221
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
222 *** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
223 from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
224 symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
225 c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
226 anonymous classes.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
227
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
228 *** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
229 syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
230
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
231 *** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
232 inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
233 support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
234 function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
235
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
236 *** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
237 (i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
238 brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
239 c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
240 (brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
241
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
242 *** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
243
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
244 *** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
245
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
246 *** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
247 for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
248
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
249 *** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
250
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
251 *** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
252 associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
253 This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
254 circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
255 class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
256
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
257 ** Gnus changes.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
258
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
259 *** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
260 added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
261 Gnus manual for the full story.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
262
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
263 *** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
264 before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
265 group, which is created automatically.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
266
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
267 *** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
268 values.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
269
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
270 *** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
271
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
272 *** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
273 outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
274
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
275 *** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
276 `C-u C-c C-c'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
277
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
278 *** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
279
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
280 *** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
281 re-highlighting of the article buffer.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
282
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
283 *** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
284
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
285 *** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
286 Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
287
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
288 *** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
289 `a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
290
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
291 *** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
292 control over simplification.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
293
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
294 *** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
295
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
296 *** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
297 limit.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
298
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
299 *** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
300
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
301 *** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
302
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
303 *** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
304 If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
305 rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
306
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
307 *** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
308 `a' forces normal posting method.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
309
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
310 *** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
311 -- `W d'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
312
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
313 *** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
314 to a non-nil value.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
315
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
316 *** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
317 where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
318
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
319 *** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
320 has been added.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
321
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
322 *** A history of where mails have been split is available.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
323
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
324 *** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
325
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
326 *** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
327 `gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
328
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
329 *** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
330 `message-cite-original-without-signature'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
331
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
332 *** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
333
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
334 *** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
335 been added.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
336
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
337 *** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
338 `gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
339
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
340 *** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
341 updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
342
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
343 *** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
344
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
345 *** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
346
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
347 *** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
348
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
349 ** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
350
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
351 *** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
352 options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
353 nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
354
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
355 *** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
356 TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
357 of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
358 TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
359 can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
360
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
361 *** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
362 All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
363 but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
364 the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
365
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
366 *** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
367 the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
368 buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
369 mismatch.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
370
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
371 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
372
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
373 *** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
374 file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
375
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
376 *** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
377 lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
378 characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
379 removed from the label.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
380
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
381 *** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
382 a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
383
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
384 *** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
385 customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
386
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
387 *** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
388 `reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
389 expressions.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
390
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
391 *** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
392
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
393 ** New/deleted modes and packages
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
394
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
395 *** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
396 SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
397
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
398 *** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
399 editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
400 SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
401
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
402 *** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
403 changes with a special face.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
404
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
405 *** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
406 this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
407 Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
408
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
409 * MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
410
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
411 ** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
412 This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
413 conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
414 and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
415 check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
416
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
417 The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
418 Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
419 distribution when the config.bat script is run.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
420
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
421 ** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
422 MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
423 controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
424 directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
425 Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
426 on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
427 string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
428 program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
429 printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
430
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
431 ** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
432 output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
433 available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
434 input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
435 temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
436 program.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
437
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
438 An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
439 and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
440 programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
441 automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
442 as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
443 ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
444
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
445 ** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
446 a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
447 MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
448 was not documented clearly before.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
449
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
450 ** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
451 This includes Tetris and Snake.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
452
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
453 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
454
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
455 ** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
456 return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
457 They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
458 meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
459
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
460 ** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
461 WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
462 and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
463
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
464 ** Changes in the file-attributes function.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
465
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
466 *** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
467 It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
468
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
469 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
470 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
471 integers.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
472
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
473 ** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
474 files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
475 arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
476 file names and attributes are returned.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
477
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
478 ** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
479 sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
480 accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
481 It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
482 returns the result.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
483
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
484 ** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
485 to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
486
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
487 ** New functions for base64 conversion:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
488
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
489 The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
490 into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
491 performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
492 optionally.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
493
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
494 Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
495 job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
496
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
497 **
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
498 The new function process-running-child-p
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
499 will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
500 terminal to its own child process.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
501
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
502 ** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
503 when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
504 to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
505 itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
506
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
507 ** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
508 be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
509
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
510 ** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
511 :included is an alias for :visible.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
512
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
513 easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
514 easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
515 to move or copy menu entries.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
516
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
517 ** Multibyte editing changes
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
518
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
519 *** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
520 an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
521 make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
522 work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
523 char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
524 (setq char (sref str idx)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
525 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
526 The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
527
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
528 If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
529 (say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
530 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
531
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
532 *** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
533 region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
534 deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
535
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
536 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
537
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
538 This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
539 across the boundary.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
540
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
541 *** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
542 `unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
543 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
544 contains 8-bit characters.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
545 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
546 contains invalid characters.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
547
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
548 *** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
549 text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
550 preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
551 text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
552 way.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
553
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
554 *** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
555 If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
556 end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
557 prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
558
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
559 *** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
560 compose Thai characters in a string.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
561
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
562 ** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
563 argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
564 for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
565 menus should always use the third argument.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
566
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
567 ** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
568 read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
569 arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
570 input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
571
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
572 ** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
573 of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
574 programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
575 inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
576
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
577 ** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
578 the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
579 returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
580 echo area contents.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
581
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
582 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
583
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
584 ** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
585 NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
586 requested feature cannot be loaded.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
587
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
588 ** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
589 foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
590 means to clear out that attribute.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
591
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
592 ** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
593 gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
594
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
595 ** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
596 read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
597 unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
598 end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
599
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
600 ** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
601 the gap of the current buffer.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
602
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
603 ** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
604 to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
605 current buffer.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
606
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
607 ** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
608 facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
609 These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
610 it back in after any modifications have been made.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
611
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
612 * Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
613
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
614 ** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
615 the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
616 /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
617 directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
618 subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
619
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
620 Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
621 names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
622 Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
623 which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
624 these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
625
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
626 Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
627 starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
628 time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
629
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
630 This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
631 Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
632 to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
633 subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
634 `.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
635 results.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
636
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
637 ** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
638 GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
639 that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
640 fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
641
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
642 * Changes in Emacs 20.3
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
643
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
644 ** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
645 including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
646 it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
647 perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
648
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
649 ** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
650 specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
651 region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
652 further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
653 command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
654 within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
655 are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
656 region.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
657
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
658 In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
659 selective undo.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
660
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
661 ** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
662 unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
663 buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
664 effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
665 Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
666
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
667 The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
668 though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
669 -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
670 load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
671
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
672 ** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
673 no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
674 enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
675 something that most users not do.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
676
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
677 ** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
678 operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
679 The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
680 applications.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
681
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
682 C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
683 pasting operations.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
684
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
685 ** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
686 setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
687 like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
688 printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
689 `ps-printer-name'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
690
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
691 ** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
692 minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
693 any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
694 except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
695 incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
696 hits a new word.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
697
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
698 Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
699 Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
700 to be confused by TeX commands.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
701
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
702 You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
703 correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
704 clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
705 of various alternative replacements and actions.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
706
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
707 Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
708 the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
709 corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
710 alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
711 flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
712
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
713 Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
714 flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
715
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
716 ** Changes in input method usage.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
717
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
718 Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
719 the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
720 respectively.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
721
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
722 You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
723
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
724 If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
725 of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
726
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
727 The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
728 that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
729
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
730 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
731
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
732 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
733
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
734 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
735 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
736
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
737 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
738 given in the following case:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
739 o When you are using a complex input method.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
740 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
741
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
742 If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
743 input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
744 and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
745 setting it to t is helpful.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
746
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
747 The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
748
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
749 In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
750 keys:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
751 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
752 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
753 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
754 These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
755 environment.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
756
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
757 ** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
758 names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
759 minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
760 get
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
761
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
762 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
763
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
764 which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
765
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
766 Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
767 Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
768
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
769 ** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
770 at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
771 its owner and group.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
772
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
773 ** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
774 Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
775
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
776 ** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
777 contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
778
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
779 ** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
780 which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
781 in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
782 by the left edge of the rectangle.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
783
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
784 ** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
785 increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
786 C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
787 for writing keyboard macros.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
788
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
789 ** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
790 files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
791 frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
792 the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
793 additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
794 info.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
795
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
796 ** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
797
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
798 ** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
799 query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
800 contents only.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
801
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
802 ** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
803 confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
804 the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
805 says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
806
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
807 ** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
808 non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
809 literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
810
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
811 ** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
812 now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
813 Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
814 inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
815
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
816 ** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
817 failure if the command produces no output.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
818
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
819 ** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
820 manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
821 the mouse.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
822
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
823 ** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
824 mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
825 function and variable names.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
826
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
827 ** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
828 reading specific files. This has higher priority than
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
829 file-coding-system-alist.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
830
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
831 ** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
832 t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
833 converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
834 the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
835 according to the current fontset.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
836
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
837 ** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
838
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
839 The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
840 that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
841 nonascii-insert-offset.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
842
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
843 For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
844 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
845 nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
846 characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
847
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
848 ** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
849 an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
850
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
851 ** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
852 letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
853
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
854 ** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
855 are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
856 command keys.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
857
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
858 ** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
859 user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
860
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
861 Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
862 user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
863 all variables that have documentation.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
864
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
865 ** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
866 shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
867 that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
868 minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
869 it should show; the default is 20.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
870
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
871 Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
872 the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
873 of your input.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
874
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
875 ** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
876 all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
877 recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
878 argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
879 the customizable options which were changed since that version.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
880 Newly added options are included as well.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
881
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
882 If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
883 then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
884 for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
885
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
886 This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
887 Customize menu.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
888
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
889 ** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
890 the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
891
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
892 ** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
893 buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
894 invoked.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
895
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
896 ** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
897 that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
898 The default is 1.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
899
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
900 ** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
901 syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
902 new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
903 (C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
904 sensibly.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
905
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
906 ** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
907
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
908 ** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
909 value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
910 two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
911
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
912 ** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
913 reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
914 for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
915 every night.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
916
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
917 ** Desktop changes
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
918
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
919 *** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
920 the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
921
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
922 *** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
923 and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
924
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
925 ** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
926 read and post multi-lingual articles.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
927
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
928 ** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
929 doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
930 be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
931 outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
932 the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
933 made invisible again.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
934
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
935 ** Mail reading and sending changes
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
936
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
937 *** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
938 the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
939 changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
940 toggle.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
941
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
942 *** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
943 now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
944 summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
945 the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
946 rmail-default-body-file.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
947
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
948 *** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
949 longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
950 handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
951
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
952 *** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
953 it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
954 is evaluated to insert the signature.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
955
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
956 *** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
957 outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
958 handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
959 putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
960 transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
961 especially interested in trying feedmail.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
962
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
963 feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
964 feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
965 provided by feedmail are:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
966
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
967 **** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
968 stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
969 there is also a queue for draft messages
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
970
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
971 **** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
972 be prompted for confirmation
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
973
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
974 **** does smart filling of address headers
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
975
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
976 **** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
977 the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
978 can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
979
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
980 **** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
981 the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
982 /usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
983 function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
984
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
985 ** Dired changes
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
986
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
987 *** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
988 files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
989
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
990 *** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
991 run Dired on the directory name at point.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
992
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
993 *** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
994 files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
995 for a specified regexp.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
996
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
997 ** VC Changes
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
998
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
999 *** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1000 conveniently.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1001
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1002 *** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1003 faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1004 Dired.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1005
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1006 VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1007 directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1008 listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1009 currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1010
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1011 You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1012 then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1013 vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1014 control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1015 on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1016
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1017 All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1018 is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1019 `v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1020 the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1021 `vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1022
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1023 The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1024 toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1025 VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1026 `* l', to mark all files currently locked.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1027
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1028 Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1029 ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1030 command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1031
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1032 *** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1033 file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1034 session to resolve them.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1035
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1036 Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1037 resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1038 contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1039 uses as well).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1040
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1041 *** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1042 command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1043 you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1044 either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1045 branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1046 If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1047 using ediff.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1048
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1049 ** Changes in Font Lock
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1050
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1051 *** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1052 are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1053 use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1054 unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1055 compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1056
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1057 ** Frame name display changes
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1058
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1059 *** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1060 frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1061 raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1062 when many frames are invisible or iconified.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1063
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1064 *** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1065 frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1066 menu.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1067
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1068 ** Comint (subshell) changes
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1069
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1070 *** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1071 subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1072 with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1073
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1074 *** There are new commands in Comint mode.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1075
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1076 C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1077 that is, the line after the last line you got.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1078 You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1079
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1080 C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1081 send the current line together with the following line, when you send
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1082 the following line.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1083
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1084 C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1085 which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1086 previously sent input.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1087
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1088 C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1089 it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1090 as the search string.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1091
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1092 *** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1093 automatically in compilation-mode windows.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1094
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1095 ** C mode changes
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1096
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1097 *** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1098 and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1099 assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1100 definition.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1101
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1102 *** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1103 (i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1104 Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1105 style is still the default however.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1106
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1107 *** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1108
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1109 *** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1110 are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1111 them. They do not have key bindings by default.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1112
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1113 *** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1114 and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1115
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1116 *** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1117 namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1118
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1119 *** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1120 makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1121
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1122 *** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1123 c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1124
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1125 *** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1126 should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1127 package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1128 variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1129
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1130 ** Changes to hippie-expand.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1131
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1132 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1133 non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1134 which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1135
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1136 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1137 non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1138 expanding dynamically.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1139
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1140 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1141 non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1142
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1143 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1144 non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1145 this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1146 expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1147
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1148 *** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1149
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1150 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1151
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1152 *** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1153 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1154 automatic key generation. This replaces variable
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1155 bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1156 against the first word in the title.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1157
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1158 *** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1159 capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1160 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1161 lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1162 lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1163 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1164
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1165 *** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1166 generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1167 replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1168 bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1169
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1170 ** Changes in vcursor.el.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1171
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1172 *** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1173 and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1174 variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1175 entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1176 `vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1177 in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1178
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1179 *** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1180 Editing group once the package is loaded.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1181
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1182 *** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1183 generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1184 vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1185
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1186 *** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1187 vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1188
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1189 ** Ispell changes.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1190
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1191 *** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1192 buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1193 are identified by syntax tables in effect.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1194
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1195 *** Generic region skipping implemented.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1196 A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1197 and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1198 defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1199 include:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1200
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1201 o URLs are automatically skipped
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1202 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1203
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1204 *** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1205
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1206 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1207
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1208 RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1209 large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1210 re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1211 section `Optimizations' in the manual.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1212
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1213 *** New recursive parser.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1214
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1215 The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1216 entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1217 recursive parser scans the individual files.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1218
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1219 *** Parsing only part of a document.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1220
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1221 Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1222 partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1223 the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1224
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1225 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1226
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1227 *** Storing parsing information in a file.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1228
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1229 This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1230
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1231 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1232
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1233 *** Using multiple selection buffers
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1234
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1235 If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1236 for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1237
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1238 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1239
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1240 *** References to external documents.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1241
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1242 The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1243 documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1244 documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1245 macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1246 RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1247 the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1248 The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1249
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1250 *** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1251
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1252 The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1253 and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1254
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1255 Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1256 the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1257
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1258 *** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1259
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1260 The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1261 buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1262
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1263 *** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1264
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1265 The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1266 contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1267 `reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1268 have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1269 enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1270 at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1271 more.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1272
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1273 *** Support for the varioref package
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1274
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1275 The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1276
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1277 *** New hooks
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1278
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1279 Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1280 and citations are created. These hooks are
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1281 `reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1282 `reftex-format-cite-function'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1283
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1284 *** Citations outside LaTeX
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1285
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1286 The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1287 a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1288
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1289 *** Short context is no longer fontified.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1290
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1291 The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1292 fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1293 fontified, use
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1294
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1295 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1296
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1297 ** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1298 With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1299 the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1300 directories that contain the same file name.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1301
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1302 Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1303 Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1304 file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1305 Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1306 have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1307 names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1308 directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1309 directory.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1310
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1311 ** New modes and packages
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1312
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1313 *** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1314 It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1315 it, but some do not.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1316
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1317 *** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1318 code.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1319
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1320 *** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1321 current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1322 around in a buffer.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1323
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1324 Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1325
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1326 *** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1327 uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1328 be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1329 established system of notation similar to Chess.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1330
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1331 *** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1332 documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1333 guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1334
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1335 *** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1336 available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1337 system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1338 simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1339 functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1340 the like.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1341
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1342 *** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1343 identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1344
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1345 *** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1346 within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1347 used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1348 the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1349
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1350 *** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1351
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1352 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1353 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1354 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1355 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1356 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1357 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1358 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1359 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1360 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1361 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1362 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1363
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1364 Platform-specific modes:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1365
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1366 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1367 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1368 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1369 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1370 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1371 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1372 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1373 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1374 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1375
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1376 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1377
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1378 ** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1379 use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1380 That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1381 Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1382
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1383 Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1384 you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1385 consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1386
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1387 ** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1388 and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1389 specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1390 searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1391
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1392 ** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1393 multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1394 character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1395 environment.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1396
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1397 ** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1398 take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1399 string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1400 current input method for reading this one event.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1401
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1402 ** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1403 now control whether to output certain characters as
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1404 backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1405 non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1406 characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1407 in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1408
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1409 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1410
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1411 ** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1412 of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1413
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1414 ** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1415 in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1416 always increases point by 1.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1417
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1418 The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1419 considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1420
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1421 See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1422
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1423 ** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1424 Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1425 default value changed. For example,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1426
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1427 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1428 :type 'integer
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1429 :group 'foo
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1430 :version "20.3")
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1431
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1432 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1433 :version "20.3")
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1434
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1435 If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1436 default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1437 is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1438 `:version' in the top level group.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1439
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1440 This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1441
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1442 ** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1443 starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1444
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1445 However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1446 symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1447 support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1448 to themselves.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1449
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1450 If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1451 this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1452 values whatever.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1453
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1454 ** There is a new debugger command, R.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1455 It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1456 in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1457
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1458 ** Frame-local variables.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1459
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1460 You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1461 the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1462 local bindings for that variable.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1463
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1464 These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1465 frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1466 modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1467 parameter name.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1468
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1469 Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1470 Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1471 active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1472 that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1473
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1474 It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1475 clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1476 very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1477 through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1478
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1479 ** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1480 "symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1481 evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1482 makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1483 See the documentation in sregex.el.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1484
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1485 ** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1486 is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1487 parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1488 The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1489
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1490 ** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1491 If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1492
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1493 ** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1494 known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1495 define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1496
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1497 ** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1498 when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1499 it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1500 history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1501
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1502 The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1503 return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1504 empty input.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1505
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1506 ** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1507 for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1508 `iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1509 Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1510 `read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1511
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1512 ** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1513 echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1514 a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1515 default password to use if the user enters nothing.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1516
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1517 ** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1518 specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1519 function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1520 place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1521 non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1522
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1523 ** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1524 If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1525 up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1526 end of the window, even if this requires computation.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1527
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1528 ** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1529 which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1530 If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1531
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1532 ** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1533 holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1534 was directed to display this buffer.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1535
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1536 ** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1537 with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1538 describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1539 other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1540 set-window-configuration.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1541
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1542 ** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1543 window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1544 positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1545 windows and the choice of buffers to display.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1546
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1547 ** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1548 override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1549 look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1550
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1551 If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1552 non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1553 map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1554
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1555 minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1556 and it is meant to be set by major modes.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1557
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1558 ** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1559 except that it discards all text properties from the result.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1560
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1561 ** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1562 USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1563 floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1564
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1565 ** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1566 to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1567 in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1568 it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1569
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1570 ** Menu changes
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1571
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1572 *** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1573 keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1574 better supported.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1575
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1576 The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1577 a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1578 you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1579 can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1580 then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1581
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1582 *** A new format for menu items is supported.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1583
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1584 In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1585 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1586 defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1587 starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1588
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1589 The format is:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1590 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1591 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1592 where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1593 string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1594 The supported properties include
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1595
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1596 :enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1597 item is enabled.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1598 :visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1599 item should appear in the menu.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1600 :filter FILTER-FN
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1601 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1602 which will be REAL-BINDING.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1603 It should return a binding to use instead.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1604 :keys DESCRIPTION
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1605 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1606 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1607 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1608 :key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1609 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1610 keyboard binding.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1611 :key-sequence nil
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1612 This means that the command normally has no
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1613 keyboard equivalent.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1614 :help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1615 :button (TYPE . SELECTED)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1616 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1617 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1618 value says whether this button is currently selected.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1619
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1620 Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1621 Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1622
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1623 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1624
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1625 ** New event types
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1626
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1627 *** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1628 mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1629 corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1630 which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1631
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1632 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1633
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1634 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1635 same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1636 indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1637 negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1638 the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1639 forward, away from the user.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1640
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1641 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1642
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1643 *** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1644 files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1645 and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1646 filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1647 loaded into Emacs. The format is:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1648
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1649 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1650
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1651 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1652 same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1653 that were dragged and dropped.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1654
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1655 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1656
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1657 ** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1658
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1659 *** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1660 any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1661 to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1662
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1663 *** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1664 can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1665 that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1666
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1667 *** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1668 in Emacs 19 and before.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1669
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1670 The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1671 The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1672
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1673 *** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1674 buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1675 unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1676 representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1677
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1678 This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1679 as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1680 viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1681 one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1682 will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1683
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1684 This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1685 representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1686 (including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1687 consistent with the new representation.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1688
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1689 *** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1690 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1691 about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1692 however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1693
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1694 The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1695 nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1696 using the table nonascii-translation-table.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1697
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1698 *** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1699 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1700 representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1701
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1702 The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1703 loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1704 is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1705
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1706 *** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1707 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1708
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1709 *** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1710 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1711
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1712 *** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1713 portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1714 so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1715 You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1716
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1717 *** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1718 it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1719
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1720 *** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1721 convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1722 buffer or string being searched.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1723
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1724 One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1725 [...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1726 searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1727 searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1728 obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1729 you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1730 expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1731
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1732 *** Structure of coding system changed.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1733
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1734 All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1735 by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1736 which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1737 as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1738 vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1739 your own alias name of a coding system by the function
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1740 define-coding-system-alias.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1741
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1742 The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1743 the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1744 access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1745 pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1746 character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1747 safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1748 'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1749 `iso-8859-1'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1750
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1751 Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1752 The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1753 coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1754 (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1755
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1756 Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1757 also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1758 are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1759 the other character sets and read it back correctly.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1760
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1761 *** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1762 proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1763 This function requires a user interaction.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1764
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1765 *** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1766 find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1767 select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1768 systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1769 a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1770 select-safe-coding-system.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1771
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1772 *** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1773 decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1774 last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1775 was done.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1776
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1777 *** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1778 used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1779 coding systems used by some specific language environment.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1780
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1781 *** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1782 return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1783 characters are found, they now return a list of single element
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1784 `undecided' or its subsidiaries.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1785
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1786 *** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1787 coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1788 coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1789 converted.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1790
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1791 *** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1792 coding system for communicating with other X clients.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1793
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1794 *** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1795 character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1796 character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1797 each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1798 either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1799 range of characters.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1800
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1801 *** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1802 Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1803
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1804 *** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1805 in the current buffer at position POS.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1806
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1807 *** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1808 input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1809 function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1810 character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1811 event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1812 binding input-method-function to nil.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1813
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1814 The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1815 method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1816 input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1817 the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1818 not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1819
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1820 The input method function is not called when reading the second and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1821 subsequent events of a key sequence.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1822
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1823 *** You can customize any language environment by using
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1824 set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1825
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1826 The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1827 customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1828 instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1829 environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1830 exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1831
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1832 * Changes in Emacs 20.1
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1833
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1834 ** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1835 options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1836 at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1837 tree structure.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1838
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1839 M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1840 user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1841
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1842 With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1843 session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1844 in your .emacs file.)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1845
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1846 ** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1847 You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1848
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1849 ** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1850 This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1851
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1852 ** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1853 immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1854 kills the region.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1855
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1856 The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1857 delete the character before point, as usual.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1858
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1859 ** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1860 on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1861 by setting search-highlight to nil.)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1862
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1863 ** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1864 insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1865 the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1866 onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1867 history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1868 past.)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1869
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1870 ** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1871 This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1872 in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1873 TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1874 makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1875
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1876 As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1877 and is an alias for it.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1878
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1879 If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1880 use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1881
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1882 ** Scrolling changes
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1883
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1884 *** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1885 position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1886
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1887 In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1888 on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1889 where it started.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1890
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1891 *** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1892 move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1893 screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1894 does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1895
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1896 *** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1897 top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1898 comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1899 recenters the window.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1900
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1901 ** International character set support (MULE)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1902
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1903 Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1904 including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1905 Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1906 Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1907 features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1908 MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1909
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1910 Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1911 coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1912 character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1913 variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1914 into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1915
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1916 Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1917 generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1918 supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1919 language, to make it possible to type them.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1920
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1921 The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1922 character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1923
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1924 The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1925 to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1926
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1927 You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1928
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1929 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1930
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1931 Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1932 characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1933 argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1934 already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1935 characters for their work until they want to change.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1936
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1937 *** Input methods
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1938
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1939 An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1940 specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1941 has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1942 the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1943 support several input methods.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1944
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1945 The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1946 another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1947 work.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1948
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1949 A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1950 characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1951 composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1952 consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1953 sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1954 letter.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1955
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1956 The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1957 by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1958 First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1959 marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1960 mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1961
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1962 None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1963 they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1964 phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1965 converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1966
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1967 Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1968 word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1969 typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1970 the first guess is wrong.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1971
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1972 *** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1973 turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1974
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1975 If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1976 byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1977 they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1978 the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1979
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1980 However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1981 use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1982 includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1983 translate automatically to and from either one.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1984
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1985 *** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1986
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1987 Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1988 file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1989 sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1990 what you want.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1991
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1992 If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1993 example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1994 system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1995 multibyte characters in that buffer.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1996
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1997 If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1998 character conversion as well.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1999
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2000 *** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2001
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2002 A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2003 Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2004 requires using many fonts.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2005
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2006 Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2007 collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2008
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2009 A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2010 the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2011 have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2012 you would use a font.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2013
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2014 If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2015 specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2016 display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2017
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2018 The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2019 (that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2020 characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2021 or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2022 and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2023
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2024 *** Defining fontsets.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2025
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2026 Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2027 chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2028 with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2029
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2030 Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2031 of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2032 `fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2033 standard fontset are created automatically.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2034
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2035 If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2036 argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2037 FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2038 with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2039 name is `fontset-startup'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2040
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2041 Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2042 The resource value should have this form:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2043 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2044 FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2045 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2046 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2047 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2048 The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2049 of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2050 CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2051 FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2052
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2053 Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2054 last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2055 You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2056
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2057 For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2058 font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2059 following resource,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2060 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2061 the font for ASCII is generated as below:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2062 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2063 Here is the substitution rule:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2064 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2065 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2066 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2067 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2068 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2069
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2070 The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2071 fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2072 that function explicitly to create a fontset.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2073
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2074 With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2075 like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2076 name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2077 fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2078 fontsets.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2079
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2080 *** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2081 defaults for a particular choice of language.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2082
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2083 Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2084 method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2085 visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2086 already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2087 language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2088 system for new files that you create.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2089
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2090 It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2091 set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2092 whole Emacs session.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2093
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2094 For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2095 chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2096 with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2097
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2098 *** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2099 specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2100 specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2101 the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2102 coding systems that Emacs supports.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2103
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2104 *** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2105 lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2106 This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2107 After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2108 is used for *the immediately following command*.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2109
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2110 So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2111 write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2112
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2113 If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2114 then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2115
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2116 For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2117 visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2118
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2119 *** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2120 construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2121 to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2122 specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2123 of the file.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2124
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2125 *** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2126 the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2127 code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2128 translated into that character code.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2129
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2130 This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2131 various countries to support the languages of those countries.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2132
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2133 By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2134
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2135 *** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2136 the coding system for keyboard input.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2137
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2138 Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2139 with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2140 some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2141
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2142 By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2143
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2144 Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2145 input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2146 translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2147 to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2148 designed to work with terminals.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2149
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2150 *** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2151 specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2152 This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2153 has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2154 translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2155 in the corresponding buffer.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2156
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2157 By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2158
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2159 *** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2160 to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2161 It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2162
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2163 *** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2164 an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2165 command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2166 want to use.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2167
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2168 C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2169 method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2170
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2171 *** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2172 layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2173 remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2174 which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2175
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2176 *** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2177 the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2178 related information.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2179
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2180 *** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2181 HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2182 scripts.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2183
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2184 *** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2185 information about the support for a particular language.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2186 You specify the language as an argument.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2187
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2188 *** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2189 the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2190 first dash.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2191
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2192 A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2193 (except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2194 whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2195 1 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2196
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2197 A alternativnyj (Russian)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2198 B big5 (Chinese)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2199 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2200 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2201 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2202 E euc-japan (Japanese)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2203 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2204 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2205 K euc-korea (Korean)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2206 R koi8 (Russian)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2207 Q tibetan
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2208 S shift_jis (Japanese)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2209 T lao
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2210 T tis620 (Thai)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2211 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2212 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2213 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2214 v viqr (Vietnamese)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2215 z hz (Chinese)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2216
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2217 When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2218 two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2219 coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2220 keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2221
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2222 *** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2223 conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2224
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2225 When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2226 into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2227 rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2228 Rmail files themselves.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2229
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2230 *** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2231 conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2232
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2233 Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2234 for sending mail:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2235
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2236 - If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2237 - Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2238 - Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2239 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2240 - Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2241
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2242 *** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2243 to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2244 Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2245 translations.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2246
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2247 ** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2248 of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2249 insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2250 without any conversion.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2251
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2252 ** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2253 You can now specify any number of octal digits.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2254 RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2255 any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2256
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2257 ** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2258 functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2259
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2260 Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2261 Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2262
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2263 Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2264 mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2265
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2266 ** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2267 complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2268 in the buffer before point.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2269
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2270 With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2271 symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2272 you are using.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2273
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2274 With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2275 just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2276
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2277 ** File locking works with NFS now.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2278
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2279 The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2280 in the same directory as FILENAME.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2281
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2282 This means that collision detection between two different machines now
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2283 works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2284 can become a bottleneck.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2285
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2286 The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2287 does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2288 create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2289 file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2290 rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2291 so useful that the change is worth while.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2292
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2293 When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2294 are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2295 collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2296 tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2297
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2298 ** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2299 it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2300 show-paren-mode.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2301
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2302 ** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2303 selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2304 delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2305
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2306 ** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2307 within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2308 complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2309
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2310 ** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2311 it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2312 set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2313
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2314 ** Changes in View mode.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2315
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2316 *** Several new commands are available in View mode.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2317 Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2318
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2319 *** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2320 view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2321
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2322 *** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2323 previous state.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2324
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2325 *** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2326 scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2327
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2328 *** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2329 non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2330 not just the selected window.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2331
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2332 *** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2333 read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2334 turns View mode on or off.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2335
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2336 *** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2337 how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2338 delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2339
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2340 ** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2341 now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2342
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2343 ** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2344 has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2345 presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2346 which version to compare with.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2347
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2348 ** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2349 blocks if a match is inside the block.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2350
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2351 The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2352 is outside the block. By customizing the variable
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2353 isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2354 shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2355
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2356 By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2357 of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2358 blocks, all of them or none.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2359
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2360 ** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2361 current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2362 confirmation first.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2363
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2364 ** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2365 now changes the major mode according to that file name.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2366 However, the mode will not be changed if
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2367 (1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2368 (2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2369 not suitable for ordinary files, or
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2370 (3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2371
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2372 This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2373
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2374 However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2375 these commands do not change the major mode.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2376
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2377 ** M-x occur changes.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2378
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2379 *** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2380 it performs a case-sensitive search.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2381
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2382 *** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2383 if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2384 using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2385
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2386 ** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2387 in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2388 window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2389 that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2390 buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2391
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2392 ** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2393 after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2394 appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2395 come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2396
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2397 ** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2398 selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2399 buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2400
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2401 ** Outline mode changes.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2402
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2403 *** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2404
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2405 *** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2406
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2407 ** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2408 you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2409 Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2410 was already active.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2411
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2412 The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2413 unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2414 get confused by it.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2415
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2416 If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2417 set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2418
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2419 ** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2420
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2421 *** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2422 conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2423 character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2424 including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2425
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2426 The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2427 mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2428 copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2429
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2430 *** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2431 are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2432 values.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2433
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2434 `dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2435 case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2436 `dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2437 case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2438
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2439 ** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2440 certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2441 can be. The default value is 30.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2442
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2443 ** Changes in Mail mode.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2444
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2445 *** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2446 Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2447 composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2448 `mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2449 `sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2450 behavior.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2451
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2452 C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2453 compose-mail-other-frame.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2454
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2455 *** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2456 the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2457 replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2458 buffer that shows the original message.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2459
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2460 *** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2461 with separator lines around the contents.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2462
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2463 *** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2464 in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2465 definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2466 need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2467
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2468 *** New features in the mail-complete command.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2469
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2470 **** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2471 for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2472 controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2473 Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2474
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2475 **** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2476 to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2477 /etc/passwd.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2478
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2479 **** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2480 to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2481 /etc/passwd.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2482
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2483 ** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2484 special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2485 directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2486 reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2487
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2488 Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2489 when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2490 be taken to be magic.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2491
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2492 ** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2493 files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2494 available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2495
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2496 M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2497 (-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2498
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2499 ** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2500 suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2501
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2502 In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2503
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2504 new key dired.el binding old key
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2505 ------- ---------------- -------
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2506 * c dired-change-marks c
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2507 * m dired-mark m
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2508 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2509 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2510 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2511 * u dired-unmark u
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2512 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2513 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2514 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2515 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2516 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2517 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2518
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2519 ** Rmail changes.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2520
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2521 *** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2522 saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2523 chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2524 each time you run it.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2525
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2526 *** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2527 whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2528
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2529 *** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2530 messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2531 means to move in the opposite direction.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2532
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2533 *** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2534 you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2535
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2536 *** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2537 just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2538 It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2539 can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2540 for output.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2541
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2542 ** Gnus changes.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2543
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2544 *** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2545
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2546 *** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2547 Gnus.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2548
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2549 *** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2550 `and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2551
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2552 *** Article washing status can be displayed in the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2553 article mode line.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2554
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2555 *** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2556
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2557 *** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2558
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2559 (setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2560
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2561 *** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2562 are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2563 `gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2564
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2565 *** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2566
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2567 *** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2568
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2569 *** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2570 See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2571
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2572 *** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2573 Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2574 used to pick articles.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2575
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2576 *** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2577 another have been added.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2578
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2579 `M-x gnus-change-server'
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2580
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2581 *** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2582 generating lines in buffers.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2583
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2584 *** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2585 `M-C-_'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2586
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2587 *** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2588
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2589 *** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2590
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2591 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2592
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2593 *** Scores can be decayed.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2594
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2595 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2596
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2597 *** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2598 Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2599
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2600 *** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2601 the native server.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2602
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2603 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2604
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2605 *** A new command for reading collections of documents
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2606 (nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2607
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2608 *** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2609
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2610 *** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2611 even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2612
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2613 *** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2614 (DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2615
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2616 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2617 a group.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2618
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2619 *** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2620 sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2621
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2622 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2623
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2624 *** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2625
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2626 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2627
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2628 *** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2629
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2630 Use the `Y c' command.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2631
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2632 *** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2633
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2634 *** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2635
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2636 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2637
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2638 *** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2639 from incoming mail before saving the mail.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2640
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2641 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2642
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2643 *** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2644
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2645 *** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2646 the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2647
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2648 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2649
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2650 Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2651 and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2652 from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2653 hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2654 this issue.)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2655
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2656 Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2657 automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2658 particular news group. This can be done by:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2659
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2660 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2661
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2662 Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2663 of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2664 "XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2665 system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2666 for reading and posting).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2667
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2668 CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2669 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2670 Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2671 newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2672 there.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2673
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2674 Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2675 default. Here are some of these default settings:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2676
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2677 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2678 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2679 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2680 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2681 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2682
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2683 When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2684 the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2685
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2686 ** CC mode changes.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2687
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2688 *** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2689 code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2690 values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2691 this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2692 Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2693 loaded.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2694
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2695 If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2696 Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2697 style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2698 share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2699 c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2700 must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2701
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2702 *** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2703 of the current buffer.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2704
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2705 *** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2706 it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2707 of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2708
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2709 *** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2710 style that the Python developers like.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2711
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2712 *** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2713 This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2714 just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2715
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2716 ** VC Changes [new]
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2717
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2718 ** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2719 name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2720 directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2721
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2722 This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2723 master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2724 developers.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2725
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2726 You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2727 RET in a buffer visiting that file.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2728
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2729 *** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2730 other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2731 writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2732 calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2733
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2734 *** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2735 version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2736
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2737 ** Calendar changes.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2738
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2739 A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2740 of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2741 for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2742
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2743 ** ps-print changes
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2744
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2745 There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2746
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2747 *** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2748
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2749 The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2750 formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2751 `a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2752 `ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2753 It defaults to `letter'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2754 If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2755
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2756 The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2757 of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2758 non-nil means "landscape" mode.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2759
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2760 The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2761 It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2762 It defaults to 1.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2763
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2764 *** Horizontal layout
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2765
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2766 The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2767 `ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2768 All are measured in points.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2769
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2770 *** Vertical layout
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2771
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2772 The vertical layout is determined by the variables
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2773 `ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2774 All are measured in points.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2775
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2776 *** Headers
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2777
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2778 If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2779 `ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2780 margin above the text.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2781
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2782 If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2783 framing box is printed around the header.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2784
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2785 The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2786 `ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2787
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2788 The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2789 `ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2790 `ps-header-font-size'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2791
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2792 *** Font managing
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2793
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2794 The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2795 used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2796 `ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2797 elements to this alist.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2798
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2799 The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2800 for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2801
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2802 ** hideshow changes.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2803
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2804 *** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2805 C++, ; for lisp).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2806
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2807 *** Support for java-mode added.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2808
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2809 *** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2810 in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2811
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2812 *** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2813 the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2814 way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2815
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2816 *** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2817 robust and a lot faster.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2818
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2819 *** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2820
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2821 *** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2822 to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2823 documentation for more details.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2824
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2825 ** Changes in Enriched mode.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2826
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2827 *** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2828 filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2829 of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2830 use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2831 the next time unless the fill-column is different.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2832
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2833 *** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2834 distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2835 as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2836 as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2837
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2838 ** Font Lock mode
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2839
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2840 *** Custom support
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2841
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2842 The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2843 font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2844 faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2845 group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2846 your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2847 consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2848
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2849 You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2850
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2851 *** Maximum decoration
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2852
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2853 Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2854 default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2855 of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2856 supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2857 to get the old behavior.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2858
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2859 *** New support
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2860
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2861 Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2862
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2863 Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2864 support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2865
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2866 *** Configurable support
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2867
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2868 Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2869 additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2870 c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2871 java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2872 list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2873 of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2874 convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2875
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2876 Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2877 way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2878 it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2879
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2880 *** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2881
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2882 You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2883 highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2884 for any mode.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2885
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2886 For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2887
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2888 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2889
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2890 in your ~/.emacs.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2891
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2892 *** New faces
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2893
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2894 Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2895 font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2896 distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2897 to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2898
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2899 *** Changes to fast-lock support mode
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2900
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2901 The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2902 cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2903 same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2904
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2905 *** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2906
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2907 The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2908 according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2909 the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2910 non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2911 refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2912 the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2913 Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2914
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2915 This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2916 For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2917 this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2918 refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2919 containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2920 the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2921
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2922 As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2923
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2924 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2925 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2926 Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2927 new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2928
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2929 If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2930 settings.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2931
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2932 ** Ada mode changes.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2933
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2934 *** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2935 If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2936 procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2937 you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2938 stubs.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2939
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2940 *** There are two new commands:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2941 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2942 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2943
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2944 The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2945 `ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2946 `ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2947
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2948 *** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2949 is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2950 Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2951
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2952 *** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2953 formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2954 places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2955 space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2956
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2957 ** Scheme mode changes.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2958
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2959 *** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2960 mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2961 for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2962 with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2963 have any effect.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2964
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2965 If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2966 still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2967 scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2968 variables as buffer-local variables.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2969
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2970 *** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2971 Use M-x dsssl-mode.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2972
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2973 ** Changes to the emacsclient program
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2974
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2975 *** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2976 USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2977 associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2978 can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2979
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2980 *** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2981 it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2982 buffer in Emacs.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2983
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2984 *** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2985 use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2986 ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2987 option takes precedence.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2988
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2989 ** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2990 constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2991 (in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2992
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2993 ** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2994 which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2995 the current defun.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2996
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2997 ** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2998 following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2999
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3000 ** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3001 and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3002 necessary).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3003
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3004 ** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3005 if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3006 these register values no longer become completely useless.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3007 If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3008 asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3009 it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3010
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3011 ** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3012 example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3013 be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3014 you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3015
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3016 You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3017 variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3018 file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3019 revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3020 only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3021
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3022 ** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3023 since it applies only to the current frame.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3024
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3025 ** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3026 file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3027 and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3028
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3029 This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3030 multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3031 variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3032 tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3033 instead of just the file you are editing.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3034
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3035 ** RefTeX mode
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3036
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3037 RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3038 and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3039 different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3040 multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3041 turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3042
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3043 C-c ( reftex-label
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3044 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3045 knows which kind of label is needed.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3046
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3047 C-c ) reftex-reference
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3048 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3049 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3050
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3051 C-c [ reftex-citation
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3052 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3053 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3054
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3055 C-c & reftex-view-crossref
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3056 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3057
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3058 C-c = reftex-toc
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3059 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3060 can quickly jump to every section.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3061
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3062 Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3063 commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3064 Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3065 reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3066 C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3067
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3068 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3069
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3070 *** Info documentation is now available.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3071
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3072 *** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3073 both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3074
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3075 *** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3076 bibtex-user-optional-fields.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3077
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3078 *** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3079 (use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3080
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3081 *** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3082 entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3083 appropriate functions.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3084
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3085 *** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3086 entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3087
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3088 *** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3089 been cleaned.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3090
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3091 *** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3092 bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3093
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3094 *** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3095 shall be delimited.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3096
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3097 *** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3098 bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3099 bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3100
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3101 *** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3102 field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3103 prefixed with `ALT'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3104
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3105 *** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3106 bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3107 formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3108 documentation).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3109
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3110 *** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3111 documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3112 for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3113
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3114 *** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3115 comma should be inserted at end of last field.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3116
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3117 *** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3118 alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3119 signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3120
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3121 *** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3122
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3123 *** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3124
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3125 *** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3126 from alien sources.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3127
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3128 *** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3129 to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3130 crossref entries.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3131
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3132 *** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3133 region.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3134
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3135 *** Added support for imenu.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3136
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3137 *** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3138 of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3139 `compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3140 `next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3141
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3142 *** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3143 from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3144
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3145 ** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3146
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3147 ** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3148
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3149 ** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3150 functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3151 Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3152 as an argument.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3153
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3154 When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3155 and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3156
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3157 ** browse-url changes
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3158
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3159 *** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3160 Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3161 (browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3162 non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3163 customization variables.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3164
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3165 *** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3166
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3167 *** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3168 lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3169 (e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3170
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3171 ** Changes in Ediff
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3172
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3173 *** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3174 pops up the Info file for this command.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3175
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3176 *** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3177 the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3178 merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3179 directories).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3180
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3181 *** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3182 and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3183 files in the same directory.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3184
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3185 *** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3186 The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3187 related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3188
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3189 ** Changes in Viper
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3190
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3191 *** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3192 *** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3193 instead of vip-.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3194 *** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3195 *** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3196 Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3197 *** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3198 *** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3199 *** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3200 color when Viper is in insert state.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3201 *** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3202 Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3203 viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3204
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3205 ** Etags changes.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3206
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3207 *** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3208 default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3209 Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3210 variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3211 not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3212
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3213 *** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3214
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3215 *** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3216 constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3217
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3218 *** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3219 recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3220 In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3221
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3222 *** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3223 C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3224 recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3225 methods and protocols.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3226
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3227 *** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3228 .cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3229 column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3230 paragraph name.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3231
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3232 *** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3233 an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3234 at least M times and as many as N times.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3235
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3236 ** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3237 in files has changed slightly.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3238
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3239 With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3240 time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3241 This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3242 with old time-stamp-format values.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3243
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3244 In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3245 (`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3246 This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3247 reasons.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3248
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3249 In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3250 natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3251 fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3252 (`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3253 time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3254 specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3255
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3256 Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3257 case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3258 truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3259
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3260 The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3261 being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3262 future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3263 recommended now will continue to work then.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3264
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3265 See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3266 details.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3267
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3268 ** There are some additional major modes:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3269
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3270 dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3271 m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3272 meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3273
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3274 ** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3275 copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3276 into Emacs.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3277
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3278 ** New Lisp packages include:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3279
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3280 *** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3281
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3282 *** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3283 be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3284
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3285 *** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3286
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3287 *** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3288 in shell buffers.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3289
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3290 *** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3291 See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3292 and `elint-defun'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3293
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3294 *** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3295 meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3296 ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3297 strings or comments.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3298
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3299 These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3300 abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3301 you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3302 insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3303 at these points.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3304
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3305 *** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3306 can visit them by short forms of their names.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3307
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3308 *** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3309 Emacs Lisp function at point.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3310
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3311 *** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3312
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3313 *** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3314 switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3315
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3316 *** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3317
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3318 *** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3319
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3320 *** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3321
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3322 *** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3323 from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3324
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3325 *** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3326 You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3327 inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3328 original place after inserting the copy.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3329
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3330 *** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3331 on the buffer.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3332
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3333 You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3334 velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3335 (with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3336
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3337 Enable mouse-drag with:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3338 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3339 -or-
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3340 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3341
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3342 *** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3343 mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3344
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3345 *** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3346 It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3347
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3348 *** ogonek
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3349
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3350 The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3351 Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3352 platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3353 TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3354 ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3355 prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3356 instance) and vice versa.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3357
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3358 To use this package load it using
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3359 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3360 Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3361 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3362 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3363 The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3364 ways of customization in `.emacs'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3365
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3366 *** Interface to ph.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3367
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3368 Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3369
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3370 The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3371 services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3372 these servers.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3373
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3374 *** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3375
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3376 *** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3377 You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3378 while the real cursor does not move.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3379
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3380 *** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3381 for visiting your favorite web sites.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3382
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3383 *** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3384 so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3385
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3386 ** movemail change
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3387
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3388 Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3389 mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3390 supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3391 user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3392
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3393 This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3394
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3395 * Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3396
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3397 ** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3398
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3399 Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3400 end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3401 Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3402 file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3403 file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3404
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3405 To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3406 C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3407 coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3408 specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3409 LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3410 save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3411
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3412 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3413
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3414 ** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3415 Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3416 vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3417 Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3418
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3419 ** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3420 to start with w32- instead of win32-.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3421
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3422 In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3423 don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3424 "win".
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3425
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3426 ** Basic Lisp changes
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3427
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3428 *** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3429 evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3430
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3431 *** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3432 be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3433 or by the user.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3434
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3435 The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3436
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3437 *** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3438
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3439 (when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3440 (unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3441
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3442 *** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3443 usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3444 its argument.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3445
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3446 *** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3447
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3448 *** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3449
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3450 *** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3451
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3452 *** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3453 error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3454 include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3455 `format' function.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3456
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3457 *** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3458 or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3459 whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3460
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3461 *** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3462 either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3463 adding one of these suffixes.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3464
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3465 *** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3466 which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3467 If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3468
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3469 We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3470 because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3471
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3472 *** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3473
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3474 *** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3475 You must load the `cl' library to define it.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3476
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3477 *** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3478 conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3479
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3480 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3481
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3482 BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3483 BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3484
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3485 *** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3486 choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3487 restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3488 works using `save-current-buffer'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3489
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3490 *** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3491 write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3492 of the last form.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3493
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3494 *** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3495 which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3496 last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3497 as the last form.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3498
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3499 *** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3500 characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3501 matches.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3502
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3503 For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3504
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3505 *** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3506 with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3507 Then it returns that string.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3508
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3509 For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3510
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3511 (with-output-to-string
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3512 (princ "The buffer is ")
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3513 (princ (buffer-name)))
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3514
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3515 returns "The buffer is foo".
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3516
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3517 ** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3518 is non-nil.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3519
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3520 These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3521 buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3522 characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3523
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3524 *** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3525 a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3526
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3527 Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3528 character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3529 Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3530 position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3531 characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3532 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3533
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3534 ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3535 Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3536 non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3537 characters".
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3538
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3539 The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3540 through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3541 "leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3542 range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3543 leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3544
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3545 *** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3546 (forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3547 multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3548 character, which may be more than one buffer position.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3549
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3550 This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3551 always one buffer position, need to be changed.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3552
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3553 However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3554
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3555 *** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3556 because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3557 have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3558 the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3559 guaranteed.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3560
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3561 *** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3562 between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3563 character).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3564
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3565 When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3566
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3567 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3568 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3569 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3570 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3571 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3572
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3573 *** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3574
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3575 *** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3576 `length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3577 more than the number of characters.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3578
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3579 You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3580 it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3581 \xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3582 is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3583 follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3584 newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3585
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3586 *** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3587 and returns a string containing those characters.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3588
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3589 *** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3590 (sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3591 counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3592 character, sref signals an error.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3593
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3594 *** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3595 in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3596 string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3597
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3598 *** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3599 in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3600 region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3601
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3602 *** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3603 the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3604 to a vector of the characters in it.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3605
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3606 *** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3607 of a string. You call it as follows:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3608
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3609 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3610
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3611 This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3612 STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3613 This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3614 Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3615 it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3616
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3617 *** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3618 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3619
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3620 *** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3621 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3622
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3623 *** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3624 to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3625 not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3626 which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3627
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3628 (truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3629
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3630 This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3631
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3632 The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3633 If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3634 are not included in the resulting value.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3635
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3636 The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3637 at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3638 WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3639 is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3640
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3641 If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3642 place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3643 character extends across that column), then the padding character
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3644 PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3645 string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3646 column START-COLUMN.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3647
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3648 *** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3649 the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3650 necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3651 difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3652 changed text, before the change.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3653
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3654 *** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3655 sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3656 one character set for each script, not for each language.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3657
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3658 **** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3659
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3660 **** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3661
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3662 **** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3663 set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3664
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3665 **** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3666 name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3667 which identify the character within that character set.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3668
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3669 **** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3670 byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3671 opposite of split-char.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3672
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3673 **** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3674 of all the characters between BEG and END.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3675
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3676 **** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3677 of all the characters in a string.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3678
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3679 *** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3680 and specifying coding systems.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3681
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3682 **** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3683 system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3684 of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3685 (Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3686 and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3687 as what to do about code conversion.)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3688
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3689 **** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3690 name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3691
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3692 **** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3693 for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3694 except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3695
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3696 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3697 which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3698 to match against a file name.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3699
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3700 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3701 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3702 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3703 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3704 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3705 specifies the coding system for encoding.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3706
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3707 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3708 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3709
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3710 **** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3711 the coding system to use for network sockets.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3712
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3713 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3714 which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3715 either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3716 service names.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3717
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3718 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3719 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3720 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3721 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3722 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3723 specifies the coding system for encoding.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3724
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3725 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3726 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3727
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3728 **** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3729 for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3730 except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3731 start the subprocess.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3732
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3733 **** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3734 systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3735 when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3736 (OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3737 to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3738
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3739 **** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3740 coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3741 subprocess.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3742
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3743 It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3744 but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3745 start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3746 connection permanently or until overridden.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3747
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3748 The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3749 file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3750 network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3751 coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3752 It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3753 system for one operation at a time.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3754
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3755 **** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3756 files, subprocesses or network connections.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3757
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3758 **** The function process-coding-system tells you what
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3759 coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3760 The value is a cons cell,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3761 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3762 where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3763 the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3764 input to the subprocess.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3765
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3766 **** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3767 change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3768
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3769 ** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3770 customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3771 you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3772
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3773 You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3774 variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3775 information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3776 legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3777 customization.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3778
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3779 Thus, instead of writing
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3780
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3781 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3782 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3783
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3784 you would now write this:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3785
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3786 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3787 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3788 :type 'boolean
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3789 :group foo)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3790
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3791 The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3792 two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3793 describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3794 for a description of them.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3795
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3796 The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3797 should belong to. You define a new group like this:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3798
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3799 (defgroup ispell nil
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3800 "Spell checking using Ispell."
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3801 :group 'processes)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3802
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3803 The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3804 group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3805 but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3806 to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3807 second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3808
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3809 Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3810 package should have just one group; a more complex package should
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3811 have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3812 package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3813 first-level subgroups.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3814
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3815 ** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3816
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3817 This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3818 separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3819
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3820 ** easy-mmode
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3821
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3822 The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3823 developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3824 only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3825 predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3826 `easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3827 `easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3828
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3829 ** Text property changes
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3830
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3831 *** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3832 text property.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3833
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3834 *** The new functions next-char-property-change and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3835 previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3836 place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3837 functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3838 starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3839
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3840 If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3841 LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3842 of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3843 position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3844
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3845 *** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3846 value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3847 is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3848
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3849 ** Changes in invisibility features
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3850
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3851 *** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3852 hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3853 is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3854 should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3855 would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3856 make the overlay visible.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3857
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3858 During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3859 invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3860 needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3861 which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3862 the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3863 t when it should hide it.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3864
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3865 *** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3866
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3867 Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3868 invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3869 and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3870 Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3871 manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3872 Here is an example of how to do this:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3873
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3874 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3875 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3876 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3877 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3878
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3879 ...
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3880 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3881
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3882 ...
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3883 ;; When done with the overlays:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3884 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3885 ;; Or respectively:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3886 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3887
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3888 ** Changes in syntax parsing.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3889
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3890 *** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3891 `parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3892 obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3893 `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3894
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3895 If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3896 is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3897 used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3898
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3899 When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3900 character in the buffer is calculated thus:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3901
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3902 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3903 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3904
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3905 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3906 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3907 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3908
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3909 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3910 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3911 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3912 determine the syntax type of the character.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3913
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3914 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3915 of the current buffer.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3916
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3917 *** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3918 value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3919 for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3920
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3921 *** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3922 and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3923 only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3924 character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3925 another character with the same code (unless quoted).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3926
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3927 These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3928 text property.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3929
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3930 *** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3931 arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3932 of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3933
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3934 *** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3935 (and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3936 element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3937 nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3938 string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3939
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3940 *** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3941 syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3942 `font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3943
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3944 ** Changes in face features
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3945
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3946 *** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3947 if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3948
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3949 *** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3950 of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3951
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3952 *** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3953 set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3954
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3955 *** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3956 set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3957
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3958 *** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3959 by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3960 and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3961 the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3962 overlay property).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3963
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3964 This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3965 arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3966
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3967 ** Changes in file-handling functions
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3968
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3969 *** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3970 directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3971 they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3972 is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3973
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3974 This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3975 begins with ~.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3976
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3977 *** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3978 it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3979
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3980 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3981 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3982
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3983 *** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3984 as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3985
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3986 *** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3987 character code conversion as well as other things.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3988
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3989 Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3990 (formerly it did not).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3991
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3992 *** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3993 environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3994
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3995 *** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3996 instead of constant strings.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3997
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3998 *** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3999 to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4000 any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4001
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4002 substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4003 in the same way as before.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4004
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4005 *** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4006 The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4007 which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4008
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4009 *** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4010 error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4011 else, and returns nil.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4012
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4013 *** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4014 directory cannot be listed.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4015
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4016 ** Changes in minibuffer input
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4017
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4018 *** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4019 read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4020 additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4021 argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4022 ways:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4023
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4024 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4025 It is available through the history command M-n.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4026
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4027 *** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4028 read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4029 argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4030 minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4031 enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4032
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4033 In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4034 argument in this way.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4035
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4036 *** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4037 from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4038 minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4039
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4040 ** Echo area features
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4041
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4042 *** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4043 echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4044 minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4045 after the echo area is cleared.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4046
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4047 *** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4048 in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4049
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4050 ** Keyboard input features
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4051
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4052 *** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4053 set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4054
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4055 *** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4056 received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4057 by keyboard macros.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4058
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4059 ** Frame-related changes
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4060
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4061 *** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4062 creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4063 hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4064
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4065 *** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4066 the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4067 has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4068
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4069 *** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4070 selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4071 value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4072 in the selected frame.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4073
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4074 *** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4075 is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4076 which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4077
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4078 ** X Windows features
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4079
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4080 *** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4081 x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4082 x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4083
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4084 *** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4085 The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4086
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4087 *** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4088 MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4089 A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4090
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4091 If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4092 it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4093
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4094 ** Subprocess features
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4095
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4096 *** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4097 functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4098 automatically.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4099
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4100 *** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4101 and returns the output from the command as a string.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4102
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4103 *** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4104 and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4105
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4106 ** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4107 does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4108
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4109 ** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4110 at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4111 goes after the other menu items.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4112
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4113 ** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4114 of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4115 around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4116 are in use.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4117
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4118 The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4119 series of several changes--if that seems safe.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4120
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4121 Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4122 after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4123 form.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4124
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4125 ** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4126 is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4127 but its hook is still run.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4128
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4129 ** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4130 for errors that are handled by condition-case.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4131
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4132 If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4133 regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4134 useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4135
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4136 This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4137 are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4138 filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4139 warned.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4140
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4141 ** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4142 way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4143
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4144 ** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4145 integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4146 functions like display-time.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4147
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4148 ** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4149 name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4150
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4151 ** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4152 can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4153 is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4154
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4155 ** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4156 if there is an error in compilation.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4157
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4158 ** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4159 switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4160 argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4161 they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4162
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4163 ** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4164 Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4165 the *scratch* buffer.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4166
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4167 ** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4168 The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4169 where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4170 e.g., in Font Lock mode.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4171
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4172 ** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4173 and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4174 It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4175
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4176 ** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4177 using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4178 variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4179 and compose-mail-other-frame.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4180
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4181 ** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4182 can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4183 full name of the specified user will be returned.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4184
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4185 ** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4186 of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4187 where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4188 in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4189 option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4190 files at all.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4191
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4192 ** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4193 and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4194 width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4195 the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4196
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4197 For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4198 minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4199 with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4200 is how %S normally pads to two positions.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4201
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4202 ** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4203
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4204 ** imenu.el changes.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4205
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4206 You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4207 item from menu created by imenu.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4208
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4209 An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4210 #include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4211 select one of those items.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4212
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4213 * Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4214
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4215 * Changes in Emacs 19.33.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4216
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4217 ** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4218 mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4219
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4220 ** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4221 use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4222 Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4223
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4224 * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4225
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4226 ** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4227 To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4228
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4229 ** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4230 conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4231 matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4232 expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4233 word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4234 all caps.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4235
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4236 ** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4237 at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4238
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4239 When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4240 does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4241 as in previous Emacs versions.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4242
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4243 ** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4244 non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4245 time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4246 frames.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4247
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4248 ** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4249 if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4250 This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4251 Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4252 accident.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4253
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4254 ** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4255 keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4256 It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4257 line and then executing the macro.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4258
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4259 This command is not new, but was never documented before.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4260
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4261 ** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4262 (something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4263 characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4264 characters.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4265
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4266 ** Font Lock mode
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4267
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4268 *** Font Lock support modes
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4269
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4270 Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4271 below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4272 hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4273 to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4274 Font Lock mode is enabled.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4275
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4276 For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4277
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4278 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4279
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4280 in your ~/.emacs.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4281
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4282 *** lazy-lock
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4283
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4284 The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4285 only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4286 becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4287 Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4288 occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4289 buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4290 Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4291
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4292 To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4293
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4294 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4295
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4296 To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4297
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4298 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4299
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4300 *** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4301 paren and key.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4302
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4303 *** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4304 supported.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4305
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4306 ** Gnus changes.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4307
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4308 Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4309 commands and variables have been added. There should be no
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4310 significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4311 previously released version, except in the message composition area.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4312
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4313 Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4314 between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4315
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4316 *** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4317 variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4318 obsolete.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4319
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4320 *** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4321 missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4322
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4323 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4324
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4325 *** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4326
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4327 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4328
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4329 *** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4330 referred.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4331
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4332 *** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4333
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4334 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4335
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4336 *** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4337
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4338 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4339
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4340 *** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4341 buffers.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4342
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4343 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4344
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4345 *** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4346
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4347 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4348
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4349 *** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4350
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4351 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4352
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4353 *** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4354
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4355 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4356
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4357 *** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4358 is possible.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4359
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4360 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4361
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4362 *** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4363 groups of groups.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4364
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4365 *** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4366
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4367 *** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4368 batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4369
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4370 *** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4371
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4372 *** The Gnus cache is much faster.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4373
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4374 *** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4375
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4376 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4377
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4378 *** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4379 expiration times.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4380
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4381 *** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4382
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4383 *** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4384 process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4385
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4386 *** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4387 articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4388 bound to keys on the `/' submap.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4389
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4390 *** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4391 articles with the `*' command.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4392
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4393 *** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4394
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4395 *** Article headers can be buttonized.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4396
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4397 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4398
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4399 *** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4400
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4401 *** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4402 `nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4403
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4404 *** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4405 buffer.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4406
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4407 *** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4408
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4409 *** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4410
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4411 *** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4412
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4413 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4414
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4415 *** Groups can be made permanently visible.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4416
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4417 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4418
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4419 *** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4420
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4421 *** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4422
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4423 *** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4424
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4425 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4426 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4427
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4428 *** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4429 refetching.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4430
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4431 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4432
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4433 *** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4434 buffer to allow easier treatment.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4435
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4436 *** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4437
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4438 *** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4439
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4440 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4441
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4442 *** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4443 articles.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4444
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4445 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4446
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4447 *** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4448
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4449 *** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4450 cited text to hide is now customizable.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4451
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4452 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4453
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4454 *** Boring headers can be hidden.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4455
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4456 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4457
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4458 *** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4459
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4460 *** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4461
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4462 The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4463 in greater detail.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4464
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4465 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4466
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4467 ** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4468 second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4469 asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4470 exists.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4471
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4472 ** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4473 as well as lists.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4474
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4475 ** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4476 of a given keymap.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4477
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4478 ** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4479 given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4480 keymap or nil.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4481
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4482 ** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4483 an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4484 name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4485 menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4486 equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4487 alias.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4488
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4489 * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4490
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4491 ** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4492
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4493 Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4494 This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4495 was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4496 far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4497 pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4498
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4499 For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4500 you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4501 `http://www.vtw.org/'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4502
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4503 ** A note about C mode indentation customization.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4504
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4505 The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4506 do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4507 It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4508 much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4509 chapter of the manual for details.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4510
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4511 However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4512 customization variables take effect.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4513
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4514 ** Marking with the mouse.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4515
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4516 When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4517 highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4518 using M-x transient-mark-mode.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4519
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4520 ** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4521
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4522 *** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4523
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4524 *** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4525 to work on NT only and not on 95.)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4526
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4527 *** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4528 in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4529 you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4530 application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4531 applications, these problems are significant.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4532
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4533 If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4534 likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4535 However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4536 will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4537 other DOS application as a subprocess.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4538
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4539 Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4540 You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4541
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4542 If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4543 subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4544 have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4545 Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4546 separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4547 Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4548
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4549 ** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4550
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4551 This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4552 which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4553 minibuffer contains.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4554
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4555 ** `title' frame parameter and resource.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4556
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4557 The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4558 It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4559 It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4560 affects just the displayed title of the frame.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4561
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4562 The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4563 it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4564 and also serves as the default for the displayed title
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4565 when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4566
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4567 ** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4568 enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4569
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4570 ** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4571 F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4572 Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4573
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4574 If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4575 menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4576 something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4577 the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4578
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4579 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4580
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4581 ** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4582 to replace the characters it "deletes".
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4583
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4584 ** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4585
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4586 ** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4587 a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4588 select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4589 It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4590 immediately after the selected one.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4591
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4592 This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4593 made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4594
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4595 ** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4596
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4597 Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4598 directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4599 If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4600 Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4601 recover-session.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4602
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4603 You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4604 auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4605 will not work.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4606
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4607 Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4608 normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4609 this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4610 bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4611 now that the bug is fixed.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4612
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4613 ** Changes to Version Control (VC)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4614
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4615 There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4616 when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4617 Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4618 which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4619
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4620 If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4621 telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4622 VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4623 the link is visited and a warning displayed.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4624
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4625 ** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4626 Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4627 is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4628
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4629 There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4630 Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4631 enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4632 The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4633 remain normal.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4634
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4635 ** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4636 header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4637
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4638 Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4639 known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4640 offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4641 Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4642
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4643 Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4644 of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4645 a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4646 name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4647 documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4648 `mail-directory-stream'.)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4649
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4650 ** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4651 skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4652 characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4653 with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4654
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4655 Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4656 - to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4657 wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4658
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4659 The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4660 less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4661 headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4662 Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4663 Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4664 fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4665 to a limitation in font-lock).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4666
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4667 External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4668
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4669 ** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4670 buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4671 buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4672 this example:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4673
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4674 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4675 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4676
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4677 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4678
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4679 *** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4680
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4681 *** Font Lock mode is now supported.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4682
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4683 *** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4684
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4685 *** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4686 entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4687 will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4688 isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4689 (bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4690 The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4691
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4692 *** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4693 does the same job.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4694
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4695 *** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4696 "Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4697
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4698 *** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4699 text.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4700
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4701 ** Font Lock mode
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4702
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4703 *** Global Font Lock mode
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4704
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4705 Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4706 new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4707 font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4708 turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4709 on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4710
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4711 For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4712
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4713 (global-font-lock-mode t)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4714
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4715 in your ~/.emacs.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4716
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4717 *** Local Refontification
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4718
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4719 In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4720 However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4721 those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4722 command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4723
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4724 In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4725 (The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4726 current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4727 above and below point.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4728
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4729 With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4730
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4731 ** Follow mode
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4732
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4733 Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4734 buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4735 side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4736 they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4737 split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4738 follow-mode.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4739
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4740 M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4741
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4742 To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4743 command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4744
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4745 ** hide-show changes.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4746
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4747 The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4748 to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4749 normal hooks.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4750
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4751 ** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4752 The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4753
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4754 ** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4755 recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4756 those that begin a function, record, or macro.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4757
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4758 ** MSDOS Changes
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4759
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4760 *** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4761 Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4762
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4763 *** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4764 and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4765
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4766 *** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4767
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4768 *** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4769 pressing both mouse buttons.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4770
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4771 *** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4772 restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4773 are:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4774
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4775 **** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4776 now works.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4777
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4778 **** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4779
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4780 **** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4781 implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4782
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4783 **** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4784
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4785 **** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4786
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4787 **** `M-x recover-session' works.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4788
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4789 **** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4790
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4791 **** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4792
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4793 * Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4794
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4795 ** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4796 tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4797 remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4798 this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4799 behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4800
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4801 ** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4802
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4803 The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4804 not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4805 need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4806 be different.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4807
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4808 It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4809 than `system-type'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4810
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4811 See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4812
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4813 ** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4814 now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4815
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4816 ** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4817 that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4818
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4819 ** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4820 no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4821 reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4822
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4823 The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4824 to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4825 like this:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4826
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4827 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4828
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4829 SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4830 It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4831 becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4832
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4833 REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4834 seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4835 means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4836
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4837 *** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4838 up if too much time passes.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4839
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4840 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4841
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4842 This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4843 If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4844 of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4845 form in BODY.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4846
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4847 *** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4848 a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4849 call looks like this:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4850
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4851 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4852
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4853 SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4854 runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4855 timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4856 ARGS.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4857
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4858 Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4859 command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4860 command.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4861
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4862 REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4863 time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4864 does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4865 each time Emacs becomes idle.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4866
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4867 If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4868 idle for SECS seconds.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4869
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4870 *** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4871 all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4872 programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4873 instead.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4874
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4875 *** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4876 there is no answer within a certain time.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4877
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4878 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4879
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4880 asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4881 within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4882 Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4883
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4884 ** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4885 arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4886 meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4887 arguments in between are ignored.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4888
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4889 This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4890 the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4891
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4892 ** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4893 /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4894 /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4895 site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4896 version.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4897
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4898 It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4899 version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4900 for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4901 has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4902 and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4903 problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4904
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4905 ** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4906 .abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4907 systems with limited file name syntax.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4908
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4909 Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4910 convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4911 for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4912 completions.el:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4913
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4914 (defvar save-completions-file-name
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4915 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4916 "*The filename to save completions to.")
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4917
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4918 This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4919 depends on the operating system, because the definition of
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4920 convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4921 Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4922 MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4923
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4924 ** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4925 rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4926 minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4927
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4928 ** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4929 marker from its buffer position.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4930
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4931 ** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4932 Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4933 The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4934
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4935 ** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4936 that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4937 condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4938 of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4939 matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4940 regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4941
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4942 This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4943 errors that happen often during editing.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4944
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4945 ** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4946 into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4947 puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4948
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4949 ** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4950 now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4951
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4952 ** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4953 a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4954 name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4955 to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4956 and not get-buffer-window.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4957
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4958 ** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4959 calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4960 being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4961
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4962 If you use this feature, you should set the variable
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4963 buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4964 property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4965 non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4966 are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4967 property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4968 over and over for the same text.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4969
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4970 ** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4971
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4972 *** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4973 in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4974
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4975 ;; @(#) HEADER: text
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4976 ;; $HEADER: text $
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4977
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4978 in addition to the normal
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4979
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4980 ;; HEADER: text
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4981
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4982 *** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4983 checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4984 lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4985
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4986 * For older news, see the file ONEWS.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4987
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4988 ----------------------------------------------------------------------
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4989 Copyright information:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4990
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4991 Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4992
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4993 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4994 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4995 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4996 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4997
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4998 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4999 of this document, or of portions of it,
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5000 under the above conditions, provided also that they
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5001 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5002
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5003 Local variables:
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5004 mode: outline
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5005 paragraph-separate: "[ ]*$"
550344dcef43 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5006 end: